Specifications | Canon 700 All in One Printer User Manual

2006 Chevrolet Monte Carlo Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-10
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-30
Airbag System
......................................... 1-52
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-67
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-9
Windows ................................................. 2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-18
Mirrors .................................................... 2-30
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-32
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-34
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-39
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-40
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-24
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-39
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-59
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-34
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-47
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-47
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-52
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-85
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-93
Electrical System ...................................... 5-94
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-100
.....................................
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
name MONTE CARLO are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 06MONTECARLO A First Printing
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
©
2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Passenger Seat ..................................1-2
Power Seat ...................................................1-2
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-8
Easy Entry Seat .............................................1-9
Rear Seats .....................................................1-10
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-17
Driver Position ..............................................1-18
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-25
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ....................1-27
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-29
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30
Child Restraints .............................................1-30
Older Children ..............................................1-30
Infants and Young Children ............................1-32
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-36
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-39
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..................................................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ...................................................1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-48
Airbag System ...............................................1-52
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-55
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-57
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-58
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-58
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-59
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-60
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-65
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-66
Restraint System Check ..................................1-67
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-67
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-68
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seat
Manual Passenger Seat
Driver’s Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power Seat
Control and Manual Recline shown
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
Your vehicle has a power driver’s seat. The control is
located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
1-2
Manual Lumbar
The driver’s seat has manual lumbar. The lever is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the front
of the seat cushion. Lift up on the lever repeatedly
to increase lumbar support. Push down on the lever
repeatedly to decrease lumbar support.
Driver’s Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power Seat
Control, and Manual Recline shown
1-3
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has this
feature, the buttons that
control temperature for the
driver’s and front
passenger’s seats are
located on the climate
control panel. See Climate
Control System on
page 3-19.
Press the button once to warm the seat to a high
temperature. Both lights below the heated seat symbol
will come on. Press the button a second time to
reduce the seat to a lower temperature. The bottom
light will be lit. Press the button a third time to turn the
heated seat off.
The heated seat feature will need to be turned on each
time the ignition is turned off and back on again.
1-4
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard
side of the seats.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
{CAUTION:
Driver’s Seat with Manual Lumbar, Power Seat
Control, and Manual Recline shown
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Head Restraints
Press the button on the
side of the head restraint
to lower it.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-7
Seatback Latches
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback rearward until it locks in place. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Passenger’s Seat shown, Driver’s Seat similar
There is a lever located on the back of both front seats
near the top on the outboard side.
These are used to fold the seatbacks forward for easy
entry and exit of the rear seats. The front passenger’s
seat has an easy entry feature which allows the
entire seat to move forward. See Easy Entry Seat on
page 1-9.
To fold the seatback forward, lift the lever and push the
seatback forward.
1-8
Easy Entry Seat
1. Lift the lever on the back of the right front seat and
tilt the seatback forward.
The front passenger seat is designed to make it easy to
get into and out of the rear seat.
2. Push on the seatback to slide the seat forward. The
seat is now in the position for easy entry/exit.
3. Return the seatback to the upright position to lock
it. Slide the seat fully rearward to lock it into its
original position.
1-9
{CAUTION:
If the easy entry right front seat is not locked,
it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the
person sitting there could be injured. After you
have used it, be sure to push rearward on an
easy entry seat to be sure it is locked.
5. Try to slide the entire seat back and forth to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
4. Make sure the safety belt is routed correctly
through the front safety belt guide.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
If your vehicle has this feature, you can fold either side
of the seatback down for more cargo space. Make
sure the front seat is not reclined. If it is, the rear
seatback will not fold down all the way.
1-10
To lower the rear seatback,
pull forward on the seat
tab located on the
outboard side of the
seatback cushion and fold
the seatback down.
This will allow you direct
access to the trunk.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To raise the rear seatback, follow these steps:
1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked
in position.
3. Ensure that the safety belts are properly stowed
over the seatback in all three positions.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position.
1-11
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
1-12
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt
Reminder Light on page 3-26 and Passenger Safety
Belt Reminder Light on page 3-27.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-13
Put someone on it.
1-14
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-15
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-30
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-32. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-17
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
If the safety belt is not routed through the guide on
the head restraint, slide the edge of the belt
webbing through the opening on the guide. Be sure
the belt is not twisted.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-18
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-23
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-24
Right Front Passenger Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-18.
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear one properly.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-25
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-26
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-27
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1-28
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-25.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip,
and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and
clip inward and in between the seatback and interior
body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-68.
1-29
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-30
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-31
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on
page 1-27. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint the belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-32
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-33
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
1-34
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-35
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-36
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-37
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on child
restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,
the child has to be secured within the child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then
follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
1-38
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point harness,
has straps that come down over each of the infant’s
shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The
five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
1-39
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and side airbag (if equipped) if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag or airbags are off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right
front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint in
the rear seat.
(Continued)
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
1-40
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing a
child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either
the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly
secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never
be installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-41
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-42
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has exposed metal lower
anchors in the crease between the seatback and
the seat cushion.
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
The top tether anchors are located on the rear seatback
filler panel. Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the top
tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-39 for additional
information.
1-44
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-46
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-47
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-39.
In addition, your vehicle has the passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
side impact airbag (if equipped) when an infant in
a rear-facing infant seat or a small child in a
forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is detected.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-60 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-28
for more information on this including important safety
information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbags deploy.
1-48
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and side airbag (if equipped), if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag or airbags will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag or airbags are off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Manual Passenger Seat on page 1-2
or Power Seat on page 1-2.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41.
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41 if the child restraint
has a top tether.
1-49
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has airbags. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-60. General Motors recommends
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag or airbags are off. If
your child restraint is forward-facing, move the seat
as far back as it will go before securing the child
restraint in this seat. See Manual Passenger
Seat on page 1-2 or Power Seat on page 1-2.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped), the off indicator in
the passenger airbag status indicator should light
and stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN
or START. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-28.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Remove the safety belt from the guide on the head
restraint by sliding the webbing through the opening
on the guide. Do not secure the child restraint
with the safety belt routed through the guide.
1-50
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
6. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
7. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
9. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator on
the overhead console will be lit and stay lit when
the key is turned to RUN or START.
1-51
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Insert the safety belt into the guide on the head restraint
by sliding the webbing through the opening on the
guide.
1-52
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have side impact airbags. Side impact
airbags are available for the driver and right front
passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and the right front passenger, the word AIRBAG
will appear on the airbag covering on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. Airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for
some unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags
may provide less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-53
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door.
(Continued)
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-30 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-32.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
CAUTION:
1-54
(Continued)
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-27
for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-55
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-56
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side
impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front
of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not
move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced
deployment is about 12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h), and
the threshold level for a full deployment is about
18 to 22 mph (29 to 35.4 km/h). The threshold level can
vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can
be somewhat above or below this range.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
1-57
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are not
intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have side impact airbags.
See Airbag System on page 1-52. Side impact airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed threshold level.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal or
near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near-frontal
impacts. For side impact airbags, inflation is determined
by the location and severity of the impact.
1-58
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal
airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For seating positions with side impact
airbags, there are also airbag modules in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts, and then only
in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions
for the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions
for side impact airbags.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After an inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some
people may not even realize the airbag inflated. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for a short
time. These components include the steering wheel
hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. For
seating positions with side impact airbags, the side
of the seatback closest to the door may be warm. The
parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in
the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from
leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
1-59
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors and turn on the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers when the airbags inflate. You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers off by using the door lock and interior
lamp control and hazard warning flasher control.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The
passenger airbag status indicator on the overhead
console will be visible when you turn your ignition key to
RUN or START. The words ON and OFF or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system
check. If you use remote start to start your vehicle
from a distance, if equipped, you may not see the
system check. When the system check is complete,
either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for
on or the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-28.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 7-9
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer for
service.
1-60
Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator – United
States
Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator – Canada
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions. The driver’s
frontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped) are
not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s airbag or airbags should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General
Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat, and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbags deploy.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and side airbag (if equipped) if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag or airbags are off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-61
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact
airbag (if equipped) if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
1-62
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s airbag or airbags, the off
indicator in the overhead console will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag or airbags are off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-48.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag or airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or
airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
airbag or airbags, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and then enable the passenger’s
airbag or airbags.
1-63
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of an airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-27 for more on this, including important
safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.
1-64
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-15.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-65
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Service before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.
1-66
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the right front passenger’s
seat), or the overhead console can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, or
an airbag covering (if equipped) on a seatback, the
airbag may not work properly. You may have to
replace the airbag module in the steering wheel,
both the airbag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, or both
the airbag module and the seatback for seating
positions with a side impact airbag (if equipped.) Do
not open or break the airbag coverings.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-67
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-68
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If an airbag inflates you will also need to replace the
driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if an airbag has not deployed. The driver and front
passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies contain the
safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety belt
pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a
collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-27.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-9
Door Locks ....................................................2-9
Power Door Locks ........................................2-10
Automatic Door Lock .....................................2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-11
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11
Trunk ..........................................................2-11
Windows ........................................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-15
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-15
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-16
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..............................2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-19
Starting the Engine .......................................2-19
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-20
Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™)
(5.3L V8 Engine) .......................................2-21
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-22
Parking Brake ..............................................2-25
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-26
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-27
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-28
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-28
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-29
Mirrors ...........................................................2-30
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-30
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-30
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-30
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® ...................................................2-31
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-31
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-32
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-32
OnStar® System .............................................2-32
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-34
Universal Home Remote System Operation ......2-35
Storage Areas ................................................2-39
Glove Box ...................................................2-39
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-39
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-39
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-39
Convenience Net ..........................................2-39
Sunroof .........................................................2-40
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
One key is used for
the ignition and the
driver’s door.
Remote Keyless Entry System
The remote keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer for
assistance. In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-5 for more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system,
with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command
to unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on
page 2-32 for more information.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-3
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked, and
the trunk can be unlatched from about 3 feet (1 m) up to
65 feet (20 m) away with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can also
start your vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. Your remote keyless entry transmitter, with
the remote start button, provides an increased range
of 195 feet (60 m) away. However, the range may
be less while the vehicle is running. As a result, you
may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than
you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry System on page 2-3.
See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-53 for
additional information. Pressing the lock button may arm
the content theft-deterrent system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15.
" (Unlock):
Remote Keyless Entry
with Remote Start
Remote Keyless Entry
without Remote Start
The following functions may be available if your vehicle
has the remote keyless entry system:
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, it may be started from outside the vehicle using
the remote keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote
Vehicle Start” following for more detailed information.
Q (Lock):
Press the lock button to lock all the doors. If
enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the parking lamps will flash once to indicate locking has
occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn will
chirp when the lock button is pressed again within
five seconds of the previous press of the lock button.
Press the unlock button to unlock the
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again within
five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior
lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until
the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the
parking lamps will flash once to indicate unlocking has
occurred. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-53.
Pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold this
button for approximately one second to release the trunk
lid. The transaxle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm):
Press and release
this button to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps
will flash and the horn will sound three times. Press and
hold this button for more than two seconds to activate the
panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn
will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm will turn
off when the ignition is moved to RUN or the alarm button
is pressed again. The ignition must be in OFF for the
panic alarm to work.
2-5
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your GM dealer. Remember to
bring any additional transmitters so they can also
be re-coded to match the new transmitter. Once your
dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. The vehicle can
have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it.
See Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-40.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message
in the vehicle’s DIC will display if the remote keyless
entry transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-46 for additional information.
2-6
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into the notch,
located below the trunk release button, and
separate the bottom half from the top half of the
transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a metal
object to do this.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the
positive side of the battery facing down. Use a
type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type. Make sure
the cover is on tightly, so water will not get in.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of
the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an outside temperature display,
during remote start this feature allows the climate control
system to default to a heating mode during colder
outside temperatures and a cooling mode during warmer
outside temperatures. If your vehicle does not have
an outside temperature display, during remote start the
climate control system will turn on at the setting the
vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, requiring a person using
remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing
so. Check local regulations for any requirements
on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
Your remote keyless entry transmitter, with the remote
start button, provides an increased range of operation.
However, the range may be less while the vehicle
is running. As a result, you may need to be closer to
your vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry System on page 2-3 for additional information.
/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lock button
and then press and hold this button to use the remote
start feature.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, do
the following:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button until the turn signal lights
flash or if the vehicle’s lights are not visible, press
and hold the remote start button for at least
four seconds. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing
the remote start button again after the vehicle
has started will turn off the ignition.
2-7
3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
4. If it is your first remote start since last driving,
repeat these steps while the engine is still
running for a 10 minute time extension.
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start, and
the engine is still running, turn the key to the RUN
position to drive the vehicle.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at the
vehicle and press the remote start button until
the parking lamps turn off.
• Turn on the hazards warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running that
may be extended with 10 more minutes. If you press
and release the transmitter lock button and then
press and hold the remote start button, on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, again before the first
10 minutes of engine running time has expired,
2-8
10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes. For
example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after five minutes of the
engine run time, 10 minutes are added and you now
have 15 minutes of engine running. The added
ten minutes are considered a second remote vehicle
start. Once two remote starts or a single start with a time
extension have been provided, the vehicle must be
started normally with the ignition key to get more remote
vehicle starts.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed or if there is
an emission control system malfunction.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil
pressure gets low.
Vehicles equipped with the remote vehicle start feature
are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle
start system enabled. The system may be enabled
or disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START”
under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-53 for
additional information.
Remote Start Ready
Doors and Locks
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer to add the manufacturer’s
remote vehicle start feature.
Door Locks
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature, your
remote keyless entry transmitter will have extended
range that will allow you to lock or unlock your vehicle
from approximately 195 feet (60 m) away.
See your dealer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
2-9
From the outside, use your key in the driver’s door or
the remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.
See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4. From the inside, use the manual or power
door locks.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch
is located on each door
above the armrest.
To manually unlock the driver’s door from the outside,
insert the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.
To manually lock the driver’s door from the outside,
insert the key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
To lock a door from the
inside, push the manual
lock lever forward. To
unlock a door, push the
lever rearward.
Press the top of the switch to unlock both doors, or
press the bottom of the switch to lock both doors.
If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system and it is armed, the power door lock switches will
be disabled. You must use your remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped, or your key to unlock the doors
while the system is armed.
Automatic Door Lock
The doors will automatically lock when the shift lever is
moved out of PARK (P). The automatic door locking
feature cannot be disabled.
2-10
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
Trunk
Your vehicle is programmed so that when the shift lever
is moved into PARK (P) all doors will unlock.
{CAUTION:
With the vehicle stopped and the engine running, door
unlocking can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). These
prompts allow the driver to choose various unlock
settings. For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-53.
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Lockout Protection
To protect you from locking your key in the vehicle, this
feature stops the power door locks from locking while
the key is in the ignition and a door is open.
If a power lock switch is pressed while a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, both doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock. A chime will sound
continuously until both doors are closed.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-28.
2-11
Trunk Release
To open the trunk from the outside, press the open
trunk button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, if
equipped.
Remote Trunk Release
You can also open the trunk from inside the vehicle.
G (Remote Trunk Release):
Press the button with
the open trunk symbol on it. The button is located
next to the exterior lamps control on the left side of the
instrument panel. The shift lever must be in PARK (P)
for the remote trunk release button to work.
If your vehicle ever loses power, you can open the trunk
by lowering the rear seat and pulling the emergency
trunk release handle located inside the trunk. See Split
Folding Rear Seat on page 1-10 and “Emergency
Trunk Release Handle” following.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
2-12
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
on the latch inside the trunk. This handle will glow
following exposure to light. Pull the release handle to
open the trunk from the inside.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-13
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
The switches on the
driver’s door are used to
control both windows.
The passenger’s window
has a switch also.
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature labeled AUTO. This allows you to lower the
window completely without holding the switch. Press the
front of the switch all the way down and release.
To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pull up
on the switch.
Sun Visors
Driver’s Switches
shown
The power window switches work while the ignition is in
RUN, ACCESSORY, or while Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-19.
To lower the window, press and hold the front of the
switch to the first position until the window is at
the desired level. To raise the window, pull up and hold
the front of the switch.
2-14
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. They
can be detached from the center retainer and slid along
the rod to cover different areas of the front window
and rotated to cover the side windows.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Swing down the sun visors and lift the cover to expose
the vanity mirror. If your vehicle has lighted vanity
mirrors, the lamps come on when you open the cover.
Do not drive with the cover lifted due to possible glare to
other drivers behind or to the side of the vehicle.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
The alarm system will arm when you use either power
lock switch to lock the doors while any door or the trunk
is open and the key is removed from the ignition.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have the optional content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
To activate the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. If you are using the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the door does not
need to be open.
3. Close all doors.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to enter
the vehicle without using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or a key or turns the ignition on with an
incorrect key. The horn will sound and the turn signal
lamps will flash for approximately two minutes.
When the alarm is armed, the trunk may be opened with
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The power door lock
switches are disabled and the doors remain locked. You
must use your remote keyless entry transmitter or your
key to unlock the doors when the system is armed.
Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter
The alarm system will arm when you use your remote
keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors, if the
key is not in the ignition.
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
The alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors.
The first time a remote UNLOCK command is received,
three flashes will be seen and three horn chirps
heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurred since
last arming.
Disarming with Your Key
The alarm system will disarm when you use your key to
unlock the doors or insert your key in ignition and
turn it from the OFF position.
2-15
PASS-Key® III+
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system. This
means you do not have to do anything special to arm
or disarm the system. It works when you transition
the key to RUN, ACCESSORY or START from the OFF
position.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-16
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security light on the
instrument panel comes on when trying to start the
vehicle, the key may have a damaged transponder. Turn
the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95. If the engine still
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to nine additional keys may be programmed for the
vehicle. The following procedure is for programming
additional keys only. If all the currently programmed
keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your
dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+
to have keys made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new additional key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has a + stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the RUN position within five seconds of removing
the original key.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are driving and the security light comes on and
stays on, you may be able to restart your engine.
Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however, may not be
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
2-17
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
With the ignition key in the ignition, the key can be
turned to four different positions:
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-36 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-18
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
A (OFF): This is the only position in which the ignition
key can be inserted or removed. This position locks
the ignition and transaxle. It is a theft-deterrent feature.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio and
windshield wipers operate while the engine is off. To use
ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.
C (RUN): This position is where the key returns to after
the vehicle is started. This position displays some of
the warning and indicator lights.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN when
the driver’s door is opened if the ignition is in OFF,
ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for more
information.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP),
which will allow your vehicle’s radio to work when the
ignition key is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position.
Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF the radio will
continue to work 10 minutes or until the driver’s door
is opened. Also, the power windows will continue to work
for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Starting Your Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If your vehicle does not start within 10 seconds,
hold the key in START for about 10 seconds at a
time until the engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try.
2-19
3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the
engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the
normal starting procedure.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have this feature. In very cold
weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant
heater can help. You will get easier starting and better
fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the
coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four
hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not
required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is attached to the underside of the diagonal
brace, which is located above the engine air
cleaner/filter assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-20
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™)
(5.3L V8 Engine)
Your vehicle’s engine may be equipped with
Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™). This system
allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its
cylinders, depending on your driving conditions.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achieve
better fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-21
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever on the console
between the seats.
There is a display, located on the instrument panel
cluster that will indicate the gear the vehicle is in.
Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic transaxle
vehicles while you are in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
to protect driveline components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It
is the best position to use when the engine is started
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-22
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-36.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You must fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
while the ignition is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it
all the way into PARK (P) while keeping the brake
pedal pushed down. Release the shift lever button if you
have a console shift. Then move the shift lever out of
PARK (P). See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-27.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift
to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
on page 4-28.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you
could damage the transaxle. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds
until then.
2-23
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
• When driving on hilly, winding roads
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears
• When going down a steep hill. For more information,
see Hill and Mountain Roads on page 4-22.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads. You would also
then want to use your brakes off and on.
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
2-24
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the vehicle
in place.
Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located to the left of the
brake pedal, near the
driver’s door.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal
with your left foot.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot, the
parking brake pedal will follow it to the released
position.
A warning chime will sound and a brake warning light
located on the instrument panel cluster will come
on, if the parking brake is set, the ignition is on and the
shift lever is not in PARK (P).
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-36.
2-25
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-36.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever
all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-26
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-26.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You must fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition
is in RUN. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on
page 2-22.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P)
while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release
the shift lever button if you have a console shift.
Then move the shift lever out of PARK (P), being sure
to press the shift lever button if you have a console shift.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal down until the end
of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-27
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
2-28
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-28.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-24.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-26.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-36.
2-29
Mirrors
There are two map lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it
on and off.
Manual Rearview Mirror
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom of
the mirror face. See your dealer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
See OnStar® System on page 2-32 for more information
about the services OnStar® provides.
Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, pull the
lever at the bottom of the mirror toward you (to the night
position). To return the mirror back to the day position,
push the lever away from you.
There are two lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it on
and off.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
If the vehicle has this mirror, it has a lever located at
the bottom of the mirror between the two lamps.
The lever is used to change the mirror from the day to
the night position. To reduce glare from headlamps
behind you while driving at night, pull the lever toward
you. To return the mirror to the day position, return
the lever to its original position.
2-30
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Your vehicle may be equipped with an automatic
dimming rearview mirror. Push the center button on the
bottom of the mirror to turn this feature on. The mirror
will darken gradually to reduce glare from headlamps
behind you. This may take a few moments. The mirror
will lighten whenever you shift to REVERSE (R).
There are two lamps located on the bottom of the mirror.
Press the button next to each lamp to turn it on and off.
One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it is
becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facing
rearward, senses headlamps behind you. To turn the
automatic dimming feature off, press the center
button again.
To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally
clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with the OnStar® System.
Press the button located below the mirror, on the far
left, for up to three seconds to turn the automatic
dimming feature off and on. While turned on, this mirror
functions exactly like the automatic dimming mirror
described previously.
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors are
located on the driver’s
door armrest.
There are two lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it on
and off.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom of
the mirror. See your dealer for more information on
the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See
OnStar® System on page 2-32 for more information
about the service OnStar® provides.
Use the selector switch located below the four-way
control panel to choose either the left or right outside
mirror. Then press any of the four arrows located on the
control pad to move each mirror in the desired
direction.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area beside and behind your vehicle.
2-31
Outside Convex Mirror
OnStar® System
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If your vehicle has this option, the surface of both
outside mirrors will heat when you activate the rear
window defogger. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Climate Control System on page 3-19.
2-32
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live advisors
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If your airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call
to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in
the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can
send a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get
you the help you need.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year, or upgrade to the Directions and Connections
Plan to meet your needs. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak to an advisor.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few
simple voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile
at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® User’s Guide
for more information.
2-33
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used
to interact with OnStar®.
See Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 3-83
for more information.
When calling into voice-mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)
to be repeated and then say “dial”. See the OnStar®
User’s Guide for more information.
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System, provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and
home lighting.
If your vehicle has the Universal Home Remote
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-34
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you
have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes,
please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete
the programming of your Universal Home Remote
Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming steps.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also recommended that upon
the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal
Home Remote buttons should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons” later in this section or, for assistance, see
Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
2-35
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons
until Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
2-36
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the Universal Home Remote button is
pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device,
most commonly, a garage door opener.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button for
two seconds, then release. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence a second time, and
depending on the brand of the garage door opener,
or other rolling code device, repeat this sequence
a third time to complete the programming.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from
the Universal Home Remote buttons.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace
Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
2-37
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal Home
Remote buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any time
beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-38
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home
Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
see Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
Storage Areas
Rear Seat Armrest
Glove Box
Your vehicle has a rear seat armrest with cupholders.
To access, pull the tab on the armrest forward.
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Convenience Net
Cupholder(s)
The vehicle may have a convenience net located on the
back wall of the trunk.
Your vehicle is equipped with cupholders located
between the front seats and in the rear seat armrest.
Center Console Storage Area
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store those in
the trunk as far forward as possible.
Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when not in use.
The console has cupholders and a storage area. To
open the console’s storage area, press the latch located
toward the front of the console lid on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
2-39
Sunroof
If your vehicle is equipped
with a sunroof, the sunroof
switches are located on
the overhead console.
Q (Vent/Express-Open): To vent the sunroof when it
is closed, press this switch once. When using the
vent, the sunshade should be fully opened. The
sunshade can be opened or closed manually by sliding
it rearward or forward.
From the vent position, press this switch again to
activate the express-open feature. Press the close
switch to stop movement of the sunroof. The sunshade
will automatically open when using express-open.
A deflector will automatically pop up when the sunroof is
opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof is
closed.
The sunroof can only be operated when the ignition is in
ACCESSORY, RUN, or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-19.
2-40
R (Close): To close the sunroof, press and hold this
switch until the sunroof motor stops, or release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Delayed Headlamps ......................................3-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System .....................................3-14
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-15
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-15
Dome Lamp .................................................3-15
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-16
Delayed Entry Lighting ...................................3-16
Delayed Exit Lighting .....................................3-16
Parade Dimming ...........................................3-17
Reading Lamps ............................................3-17
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-17
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-17
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Climate Control System .................................3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-22
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-23
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-24
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-25
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-26
Tachometer .................................................3-26
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-26
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .............3-27
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-27
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-28
Charging System Light ..................................3-30
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-31
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-32
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-33
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-33
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-34
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-34
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-37
Security Light ...............................................3-37
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-38
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-38
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-38
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-38
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-39
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-40
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-46
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-53
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-59
Setting the Time (Without Date Display) ...........3-60
Setting the Time (With Date Display) ...............3-61
Radio with CD (Base) ...................................3-62
Radio with CD (MP3) ....................................3-67
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-82
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-83
Radio Reception ...........................................3-83
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-84
Care of the CD Player ...................................3-84
Backglass Antenna .......................................3-85
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-85
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:
A. Air Vent. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-22.
B. Remote Trunk Release Button. See “Remote Trunk
Release” under Trunk on page 2-11.
C. Multifunction Lever. See Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-7.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-25.
E. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
F. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-39.
G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-59.
H. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-13.
I. Instrument Panel Brightness. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 3-15.
J. Traction Control On/Off Button (If Equipped). See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
K. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on
page 3-6.
L. Steering Wheel Cruise Control (If Equipped). See
Cruise Control on page 3-10.
M. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
N. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
O. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-83.
P. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-18.
Q. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on
page 3-19.
R. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-17.
S. Automatic Transaxle Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 2-22.
T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-39.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
The hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
top of the steering
column.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever.
Then move the wheel
to a comfortable position
and release the lever
to lock the wheel in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7.
• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on
page 3-8.
• LQ Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer
on page 3-9.
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps
on page 3-13.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
If the arrow flashes faster than normal as you signal a
turn or a lane change, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95.
3-7
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If you leave either one of your turn signals on and drive
more than three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km), a chime
will sound to alert you.
With the turn signal lever in the low-beam position, pull
the lever toward you momentarily to switch to
high-beam, (to signal you are going to pass).
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
If the headlamps are on, they will return to low-beam
when the lever is released.
To change your headlamps from low beams to high
beams, or from high to low, pull the multifunction lever
all the way toward you. Then release it.
This feature operates even if the headlamps are off.
While the high beams are
on, this light will appear on
the instrument panel
cluster.
This light works only while the key is in RUN. The fog
lamps (if equipped) are not illuminated when the
high beams are on.
Windshield Wipers
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
may not clear the windshield well, making it harder to
see and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. For more information,
see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-52
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
3-8
8(Mist):
Windshield Washer
N(Delay):
At the top of the multifunction lever, there’s a paddle
with the windshield washer symbol on it. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. The
wipers will run for several sweeps and then either stop
or return to your preset speed. The ignition key must
be in ACCESSORY or RUN for this to work. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-39.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings. For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the delay
settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn
the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off):
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you are low on washer fluid, a message will be
illuminated in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
for 60 seconds. When the ignition is turned off, a
message will appear again for three seconds as a
reminder that the fluid level is low. For more information
on DIC messages, see DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46.
The washer fluid message will no longer display when
the washer fluid reservoir has been filled.
3-9
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. When
road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you
may turn the cruise control back on.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
When you apply your brakes, cruise control is
turned off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system (if equipped) begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
3-10
T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruise control
on and off. The indicator will be lit when cruise control
is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to
make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
SET–: Press this button to set the speed or make the
vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel):
Press this button to cancel cruise control.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the
cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
press the +RES button on your steering wheel. The
vehicle will go back to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until you reach your new desired speed,
then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button.
1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press and release the SET– button located on the
steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-11
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until you reach the lower speed you want,
then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each
time you do this, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not
use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the [ (cancel) button on the steering wheel.
• Press the T (on/off) button on the steering
wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-12
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Fog Lamps (if equipped)
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
O (Off):
Momentarily turn the control to this position to
turn off the automatic light control. Momentarily turn to
this position again to turn automatic light control on again.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:
• Parking Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
;(Parking Lamps):
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
2(Headlamps):
Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps
listed below. A warning chime will sound if you open
the driver’s door when the ignition switch is off and the
headlamps are on.
•
•
•
•
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
- (Fog Lamps, If Equipped): Push the fog lamps
control in to turn on the fog lamps.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-15.
3-13
Delayed Headlamps
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.
The delayed headlamps feature provides a period of
exterior lighting as you leave the area around your
vehicle. The feature is activated when the headlamps
are on due to the automatic headlamps control
feature later described in this section, and when the
ignition is turned off. Your headlamps will then remain on
until the exterior lamps control is moved to the parking
lamps position or until either a 30 second or 60 second
lighting period has ended.
The DRL system’s automatic headlamp control will
make the low-beam headlamps come on at a reduced
brightness when the following conditions are met:
If you turn off the ignition with the headlamps switch in
the parking lamps or headlamps position, the delayed
headlamps cycle will not occur.
To disable the delayed headlamps feature or change
the time of delay, see “Exit Lighting” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-53.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
3-14
• The ignition is in RUN.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The engine is running.
When the DRL are on, only the low-beam headlamps,
at a reduced level of brightness, will be on. The
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will
not be on. The instrument panel and cluster will also
not be lit.
When it is dark enough outside, your low-beam
headlamps will turn off and the headlamps and parking
lamps will turn on. The other lamps that come on
with the headlamps will also come on.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will go
off and the DRL will come on.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle is equipped with fog
lamps, it is located on the exterior lamps control.
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knob with this
symbol on it is located next to the exterior lamps
control. Push and pull the knob out halfway and then
turn the knob clockwise to brighten or counterclockwise
to dim the lights.
Your ignition must be in RUN for the fog lamps to
illuminate.
To turn the fog lamps on, press exterior lamps button. A
light will come on in the button to let you know that
the fog lamps are on. Press the exterior lamps button
again to turn the fog lamps off.
The ignition must be in RUN and the parking lamps
must be on for your fog lamps to work. The parking
lamps will turn on automatically when you turn on the
fog lamps.
The fog lamps will go off while you change to high-beam
headlamps.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Courtesy Lamps
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps
automatically come on. They make it easy for you to
enter and leave your vehicle. You can also manually turn
these lamps on by turning the instrument panel
brightness control clockwise all the way.
The reading lamps, located on the rearview mirror, can
be turned on or off independent of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are closed.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn this lamp on by turning the instrument
panel brightness control clockwise.
3-15
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle may have the entry lighting feature. Your
courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for a set
time whenever you press UNLOCK on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.
If you open a door, the lamps will stay on while it’s open
and then turn off automatically about 25 seconds after
you close it. If you press UNLOCK and don’t open
a door, the lamps will turn off after about 40 seconds.
Illuminated entry includes a feature called theater
dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps don’t just
turn off at the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly
dim after the delay time until they go out. The delay
time is canceled if you turn the ignition key to RUN or
press the power door lock switch.
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,
which means the courtesy lamps won’t come on unless
a door is opened.
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting to
work. Immediately after both doors have been closed,
the delayed entry lighting feature will continue to
work until one of the following occurs:
• The ignition is in RUN.
• The doors are locked.
• An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on.
Delayed Exit Lighting
This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time
after the key is removed from the ignition.
The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work.
When the key is removed, interior illumination will
activate and remain on until one of the following occurs:
• The ignition is in RUN.
• The power door locks are activated.
• An illumination period of 20 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on because a door is open.
3-16
Parade Dimming
The instrument panel has an added feature called
parade dimming. This feature prohibits the dimming of
your instrument panel displays during the daylight
while the headlamps are on so that you’ll still be able to
see the displays.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the rearview mirror.
Press the button to turn them on and off.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery in case you accidentally leave on the
interior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor
vanity lamps, trunk lamp or glove box lamps. If you leave
any of these lamps on, they will automatically turn off
after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The lamps
won’t come back on again until you do the following:
• Turn the ignition on.
• Turn the exterior lamps control off, then on again.
If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on
the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps
after only three minutes.
Battery rundown protection will also work if the
headlamps are left on. After having been left on for
10 minutes, the headlamps and the parking lamps will
flash three times. They will remain on for one more
minute before turning off automatically.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle has a two 12-volt outlets which can be
used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone, a compact disc player, etc.
One is located at the front of the console and the other
is located at the rear of the console. Lift the cover to
access the outlet. When not using the outlet, make sure
the protective cover is in place.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
3-17
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the amperage rating.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
Your vehicle may have a cigarette lighter and ashtray
located on the console. The ashtray is removable
and has a cupholder and liner underneath. To remove
the ashtray, lift it up with the liner and pull it out.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the heating
element and let go. When the lighter is ready it will
pop out by itself.
3-18
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dual or single
climate control system. With this system you can control
the heating, cooling, defrost, defog, and ventilation for
your vehicle.
Single Zone
Manual Operation
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
This mode directs approximately half of
the of air to the instrument panel outlets and the
other half to the floor outlets.
3-19
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the
windshield and side window outlets. In this mode, the
system will automatically select Outside Air.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and
Defrosting” later in this section.
By positioning the right knob between two modes, a
combination of those two modes is selected.
The air conditioning compressor will be engaged unless
the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.
Recirculation cannot be selected when in Floor mode.
9 (Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highest
setting, the passenger compartment air filter, if
equipped, may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on
page 3-23 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
: (Outside Air):
When this mode is on, outside air
will circulate throughout your vehicle. When the
button is pressed, an indicator light in the button will
come on to let you know that it is activated. Outside air
cannot be used with the recirculation mode.
3-20
? (Recirculation):
When the button is pressed, an
indicator light will come on.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle. It
can be used to prevent outside air and odors from
entering your vehicle. Recirculation may also help heat
or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly once
the temperature inside the vehicle is equal to or better
than the outside temperature. The recirculation mode
cannot be used with outside air, floor, defrost, or defog
modes.
Temperature Control: Rotate the thumbwheels up or
down to increase or decrease the temperature on
the driver’s side or the passenger side of the vehicle for
the dual zone system. Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature for the single zone system.
# (Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn the
air conditioning system on or off. When A/C is pressed,
an indicator light will come on to let you know that
the air conditioning has been activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the outside air.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the coolest temperature for both zones.
5. Select the highest fan speeds.
6. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature is below the
outside temperature, select recirculation mode for
enhanced cooling.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air
inside of your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation
mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog
mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob clockwise to select the defog or
defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
- (Defog): This mode directs air equally to the
windshield and the floor outlets. When you select this
mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is below 40°F (4°C). The recirculation mode cannot
be selected while in the defog mode.
0 (Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, side window vents, and to the floor vents. In
this mode, the system will automatically force outside air
into your vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).
3-21
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the knob located below or to the side of the outlet,
to change the direction of the air flow.
<:
Operation Tips
The rear window defogger will turn off
automatically after it has been activated. The duration
the rear window defogger is on will be longer if the
vehicle is being driven. The defogger can also be turned
off by pressing the button again or by turning off the
engine.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defogger buttin is on.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
3-22
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside your vehicle more
effectively.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter, if equipped, may need to replaced. For
more information, see Passenger Compartment Air
Filter on page 3-23 and Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle has a passenger compartment particulate
air filter. It is located underneath the hood just below
the windshield wiper arm on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle, underneath the air inlet grille.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering the
climate control system. Like the engine’s air
cleaner/filter, it may need to be changed periodically to
ensure system performance. For information on how
often to change the passenger compartment air
filter, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
1. Turn off the ignition when the windshield wipers are
in the up position.
5. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.
2. Raise the vehicle hood.
7. Remove the water deflector plate.
3. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from
the fender rail and air inlet grille.
8. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
4. Peel back the hood weatherstrip from the
passenger’s side of the vehicle halfway to center.
6. Remove the air inlet grille.
9. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
For the type of filter to use, see Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-13.
3-23
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-24
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information
Center (DIC) that works along with the warning lights
and gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-39.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel is in your tank and many other things you need to drive safely
and economically.
United States Uplevel shown, Base and Canada similar
3-25
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven in either miles (used in the United States)
or in kilometers (used in Canada).
When the key is turned to RUN, a chime will come on
for several seconds to remind people to fasten their
safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If you
see ERROR, you’ll know someone has probably
tampered with it and the numbers may not be accurate.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done.
But if it can’t, then it will be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
Tachometer
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
3-26
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-60
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-52.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-27
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-28
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF,
or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a
system check. If you use remote start to start your vehicle
from a distance (if equipped), you may not see the
system check. Then, after several more seconds, the
status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the
on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag
(if equipped).
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbags deploy.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system
is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe,
and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be transported in
vehicles with a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint, whenever possible.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s airbag or airbags are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s
airbag or airbags. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-60 for more on this, including important
safety information.
3-29
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of an airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-27.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-30
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-31 and Towing Your Vehicle on
page 4-34.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
3-31
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
If your vehicle is equipped
with anti-lock brakes, the
anti-lock brake system
warning light should come
on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition
key to RUN.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on
longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
the ignition off or, if the light comes on and stays on
when you are driving, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you are driving, the anti-lock brake system
needs service and you do not have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should
come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
This is normal. If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
3-32
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
For vehicles equipped with
the traction control system,
this warning light should
come on briefly when
the engine is started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If
it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may
be a problem with your traction control system and
your vehicle may need service. When this warning light
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for
more information.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-29 for more information.
United States
Canada
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29.
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves towards the “H” (United States)
or the shaded in thermostat (Canada), it means that your
engine coolant has overheated. If you have been
operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions,
you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and
turn off the engine as soon as possible.
This light will also come on when starting your vehicle.
If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-29 for more
information.
3-33
Tire Pressure Light
If equipped, this light
should come on briefly as
you start the engine. It
will then come on
only when a flat or low tire
pressure condition
exists.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-62 for
more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
3-34
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off,
wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If
the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On
Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as soon
as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle.
3-35
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-36
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
The light goes on when you turn your key to RUN or
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That is a
check to be sure the light works. If it does not come
on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you
if something goes wrong.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through your engine properly. You
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light, see
Theft-Deterrent Systems
on page 2-15.
This light tells you if there
could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
3-37
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamps light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-15 for more information.
Cruise Control Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
Fuel Gage
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more
information.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
3-38
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the speedometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel,
to the right of the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected. The bottom line of the DIC shows the
shift lever position indicator. See Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-22 for more information.
If your vehicle has these features, the DIC also displays
the compass direction and the outside air temperature
when viewing the trip and fuel information. The compass
direction appears on the top right corner of the DIC
display. The outside air temperature automatically
appears in the bottom right corner of the DIC display. If
there is a problem with the system that controls the
temperature display, the numbers will be replaced with
dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-53 for
more information.
3-39
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, to the right of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions are
detailed in the following
pages.
T (Vehicle Information):
Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings and Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming on
vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system,
compass zone and compass calibration on vehicles with
this feature, and remote keyless entry transmitter
programming.
U (Customization):
Press this button to customize the
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-53 for more information.
V (Set/Reset):
Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through
the following menu items:
Odometer
3 (Trip/Fuel):
Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy,
instantaneous economy, Displacement on Demand™
(DoD™) indicator on vehicles with this feature, and
average speed.
3-40
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Trip A and Trip B
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP B
displays. This display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the
last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers
can be used at the same time.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing the set/reset button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least two seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) that were driven during the last
ignition cycle.
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can
be driven without refueling.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This
estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46
for more information.
3-41
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This
number is calculated based on the number of mpg
(L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu item
was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
Instantaneous Economy and Displacement
on Demand™ (DoD™) Indicator
Press the trip/fuel button until INST ECONOMY displays.
If your vehicle has a V8 engine, INST ECONOMY
8CYL MODE will display. This display shows the current
fuel economy at a particular moment and will change
frequently as driving conditions change. This display
shows the instantaneous fuel economy in miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
Unlike average economy, this screen cannot be reset.
If your vehicle has a V8 engine, a Displacement on
Demand™ (DoD™) indicator will display on the right side
of the DIC, while INST ECONOMY displays on the left
side. DoD™ allows the engine to operate on either four or
eight cylinders, depending on your driving demands.
When DoD™ is active, 4CYL MODE will display on the
DIC. When DoD™ is inactive, 8CYL MODE will
display. See Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™)
(5.3L V8 Engine) on page 2-21 for more information.
Average Speed
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of
this value. To reset the value, press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-42
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information):
Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. You should
change your oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oil on
page 5-17. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 5-20.
Units
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units.
Tire Pressure
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the vehicle information button until the DIC shows the
tire pressure for the front tires. Press the vehicle
information button again to view the pressure for the
rear tires.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for more
information.
3-43
Learn Tire Positions
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or
sensor, the system must re-learn the tire positions.
To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-62. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-66 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46 for more information.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance Procedure
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays.
Compass Zone
Your vehicle may have this feature. Under certain
circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance and reset the zone through the DIC.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the compass
in the vehicle could give false readings.
In order to do this, the compass must be set or
calibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicle is
traveling.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3-44
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
Navigate to one of the trip/fuel menu screens to
view the direction the vehicle is moving. This will be
shown in the top right corner of the DIC display.
4. If you need to calibrate the compass, use the
compass calibration procedure. See “Compass
Calibration Procedure” following.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a safe location where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a problem.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is traveling. See “Compass
Variance Procedure” earlier in this section.
2. Press the vehicle information button until the
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS screen
is displayed.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
when the calibration is complete.
Remote Key
This display allows you to match the remote keyless
entry transmitter to your vehicle. To match a remote
keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle, do the
following:
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
will display.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for approximately
15 seconds.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to OFF.
3-45
Blank Display
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This display shows no information.
This message will display when the automatic
headlamps are turned off. See Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-14 for
more information.
Customization Menu Items
U (Customization): Press this button to enter the
feature settings menu. This display allows you to
customize the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC
Vehicle Customization on page 3-53 for more
information.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some
action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another. Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you can press the set/reset button to
acknowledge that you received the message and clear it
from the DIC display. Pressing any of the DIC buttons will
also acknowledge and clear any messages. Some
messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the display seriously and
remember that clearing the messages will only make the
messages disappear, not correct the problem. The
following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-46
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message will display when the automatic
headlamps are turned on. See Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-14 for
more information.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message will display when service is required for
the vehicle. See your GM dealer. See Engine Oil
on page 5-17 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
Acknowledging the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING. That
must be done at the OIL LIFE screen under the
vehicle information menu. See “Oil Life” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-40 and Engine Oil
Life System on page 5-20.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system,
this message will display when the tire pressure in one of
the tires needs to be checked. This message will also
display LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or
RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked.
You can receive more than one tire pressure message at
a time. To read the other messages that may have been
sent at the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on your Tire Loading Information Label. See
Tires on page 5-54, Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29,
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60. The DIC
display also shows the tire pressure values for the front
and rear tires by pressing the vehicle information button.
See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-40. If the tire
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light will
come on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-34.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message will display when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the A/C operation will automatically resume. You can
continue to drive your vehicle. If this message continues
to appear, have the system repaired by your GM dealer
as soon as possible to avoid compressor damage.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
This message will display when the vehicle’s engine oil
is low. Fill the oil to the proper level as soon as
possible. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the engine oil fill location. Also, see
Engine Oil on page 5-17 for information on the kind of
oil to use and the proper oil level.
This message will display when the driver’s door is not
closed properly. When this message appears, you
should make sure that the driver’s door is closed
completely.
3-47
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-29 for more information.
This message will display when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your GM dealer for service as soon as possible.
This message will display when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-29 for more information.
This message will display along with a continuous
chime when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn
the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine
damage. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29.
3-48
ERROR
This message will display while viewing the odometer or
trip odometers if there is a problem with the instrument
panel cluster. See your GM dealer for service.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message will display when your vehicle is low on
fuel. You should refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
See Fuel Gage on page 3-38 and Filling the Tank on
page 5-8 for more information.
HOOD OPEN
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message will display when the hood is not closed
properly. When this message appears, you should make
sure that the hood is closed completely. See Hood
Release on page 5-11.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message will display when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-17 for more information.
This message will display when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light will also appear
on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure
Light on page 3-37.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as
possible when this message is displayed.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message will display when the passenger’s door is
not closed properly. When this message appears,
you should make sure that the passenger’s door is
closed completely.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message will display while you are matching a
remote keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4
and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-40 for more
information.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message will display when the battery in the remote
keyless entry transmitter needs to be replaced. To
replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4.
3-49
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message will display when the electronic sensors
that control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your GM dealer if you notice a drop
in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
This message will display when service is required on
the brake system. Have the brake system serviced
by your GM dealer as soon as possible. The brake
system warning light will also appear on the instrument
panel cluster when this message appears on the
DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-31.
SERVICE AIR BAG
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message will display when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-27 for more information.
This message will display when a problem is detected
with the power steering system. When this message
is displayed, you may notice that the effort required to
steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier, but you will
still be able to steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer immediately.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message will display when there is a problem with
the generator and battery charging systems. Driving
with this problem could drain your battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical
system checked by your GM dealer immediately.
3-50
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This message will display when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A
fault has been detected in the system which means that
the system is disabled and it is not protecting the
vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may
want to take the vehicle to your GM dealer before
turning off the engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Operation
on page 2-16 for more information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message will display if a part on the system
is not working properly. If you drive your vehicle while
any of the four sensors are missing or inoperable,
the warning will come on in about 10 minutes. A sensor
would be missing, for example, if you put different
wheels on your vehicle without transferring the sensors.
If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be
a problem with the TPM. See your GM dealer.
This message will display when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has the traction control system, this
message will display when the system is not functioning
properly. A warning light will also appear on the
instrument panel cluster. See Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light on page 3-32. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
Have the traction control system serviced by your
GM dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message will display when there is a problem with
the transaxle. See your GM dealer for service.
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
This message will display if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer
immediately.
This message will only appear while the ignition is in
RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message will display if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you
were away from your vehicle. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-15 for more information.
3-51
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message may be displayed if the gas cap is not
on, or is not fully tightened. Check the gas cap to ensure
that it is on properly. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8
for more information.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message will display when the system is
re-learning the tire positions. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-62. The tire positions must be
re-learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire
or sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-66 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60 for
more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has the traction control system, this
message will display when the traction control system
turns off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-9 for more information.
This message will only display while the ignition is in
RUN and will disappear after 10 seconds, unless
it is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.
3-52
Any of the following conditions may cause the traction
control system to turn off:
• The traction control system is turned off by pressing
the traction control button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
• The battery is low.
• There is a traction control system failure. See your
GM dealer for service.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message will display when the transaxle fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to
idle until it cools down. If the warning message
continues to display, have the vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer as soon as possible.
TRUNK OPEN
This message will display when the trunk is not closed
completely. You should make sure that the trunk is
closed completely. See Trunk on page 2-11.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message will display as a reminder to turn off the
turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than
about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in RUN. The message will not disappear
until the turn signal is manually turned off, or a turn
is completed.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message will display when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for the location of the windshield
washer reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 5-39 for more information.
DIC Vehicle Customization
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on your DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
3-53
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appear in
Spanish.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Select one of the available choices and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button to display all
DIC messages in English.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock on page 2-11 for more information.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following choices:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following choices:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appear in
French.
3-54
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Select one of the available choices and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. You will not receive feedback
when locking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter if any of the doors are open. See
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4
for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through
the following choices:
HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, and the horn will sound when
the lock button is pressed again within five seconds
of the previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Select one of the available choices and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the remote keyless entry transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter if the doors are open. See
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4
for more information.
3-55
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following choices:
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
access the settings for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll through the following
choices:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
Select one of the available choices and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
EXIT LIGHTING
If it is dark enough outside, this feature allows you to
select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to
remain on. This happens after the vehicle is unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter or if the
vehicle key is turned to OFF from RUN.
3-56
Select one of the available choices and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following choices:
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed, or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote
Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4 for more
information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
access the settings for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll through the following
choices:
NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be set to a
normal level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Select one of the available choices and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
Select one of the available choices and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
3-57
REMOTE START
FACTORY SETTINGS
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
your remote keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote
Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-4 for more information.
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
access the settings for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll through the following
choices:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Select one of the available choices and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following choices:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
Select one of the available choices and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the FEATURE
SETTINGS menu.
Press the customization button until FEATURE
SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the FEATURE
SETTINGS menu.
3-58
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.
Then, when driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.
3-59
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
3-60
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-19 for more
information.
Setting the Time (Without Date
Display)
If your vehicle has a base AM/FM radio with a single
CD player and preset buttons numbered one through
six, the radio will have a clock button for setting the time.
You can set the time by following these steps:
1. Press the clock button until the hour numbers begin
flashing on the display. Press the clock button a
second time and the minute numbers will begin
flashing on the display.
2. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
flashing, rotate the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the time.
Instead of using the tune knob, you can also
press the SEEK, FWD, or REV buttons to adjust
the time.
3. Press the clock button again until the clock display
stops flashing to set the currently displayed time;
otherwise, the flashing will stop after five seconds
and the current time displayed will be
automatically set.
Setting the Time (With Date Display)
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player,
the radio will have a clock button for setting the time and
date. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
will appear on the display. Press the pushbutton located
under any one of the labels that you want to change.
Every time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or
the date if selected, will increase by one. Another
way to increase the time or date, is to press the right
SEEK arrow or FWD button. To decrease, press the left
SEEK arrow or REV button. You can also rotate the
tune knob to adjust the selected setting.
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
radio will have a MENU button instead of the clock
button to set the time and date. Press the MENU button.
Once the clock option is displayed, press the pushbutton
located under that label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY will appear on the display. To change the time or
date, follow the instructions given earlier in this
section.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, press the clock
button and then the pushbutton located under the
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H, and
the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) are displayed,
press the pushbutton located under the desired option.
Press the clock or MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
3-61
Radio with CD (Base)
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2
or AM. The display will show the selection.
f (Tune):
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
a few seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will
go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
The radio remembers the previous volume setting
whenever the radio is turned on. You can still manually
adjust the volume by using the volume knob.
3-62
4 (Information):
Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. While
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until
Manual appears on the display or start to manually
adjust the bass or treble by pressing the tune knob.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
3. Tune in the desired station.
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until you hear a
beep. Whenever that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set will return.
5. Repeat the Steps 2-4 for each pushbutton.
To adjust the balance
or fade, press this button or the tune knob until the
desired speaker control label appears on the display.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the setting. You can also adjust the setting by
pressing either the SEEK, FWD, or REV buttons.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Radio Messages
BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass
or treble, press the tune knob or BASS/TREBLE
button until the desired tone control label appears
on the display. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the setting.
You can also adjust the setting by pressing either
the SEEK, FWD, or REV buttons. The display will show
the current bass or treble level. If a station’s frequency
is weak, or if there is static, decrease the treble.
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle and it
must be returned to your dealer for service.
Loc: This message is displayed while the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-63
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the radio display. As each new track starts to play,
the track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-84 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-64
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Z EJECT:
Press the CD eject button to eject the
CD. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the
CD will be automatically pulled back into the player.
f (Tune):
Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next
track. If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple
times, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold this
pushbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.
You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release
this pushbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to CD
tracks in random, rather than sequential order. To
use random, do the following:
1. Press this button to play tracks from the CD you
are listening to in random order. The random icon
will appear on the display.
2. Press this button again to turn off random play. The
random icon will disappear from the display.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated (played over and over).
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. An arrow symbol will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for a few seconds. An arrow
symbol will appear on the display. Press RPT again
to turn off repeat play. When repeat is off, the
symbol is no longer displayed.
4 (Information):
Press this button to switch the display
between the track number, elapsed time of the track,
and the time. When the ignition is off, press this button
to display the time.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while a
CD is playing. The CD will remain safely inside the radio
for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while listening to the radio. The CD icon and track
number will appear on the display while a CD is in the
player. Press this button again and the system will
automatically search for an auxiliary input device such
as a portable audio player.
3-65
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD-R.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer
while reporting the problem.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. You can connect an
external audio device such as an iPod, MP3 player, CD
changer, or cassette player, to the auxiliary input jack for
use as another source for audio listening.
3-66
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the car
speakers.
When a device is connected, the radio automatically
begins playing audio from the device over the car
speakers.
O (Power/Volume):
Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. You may need to do additional
volume adjustments from the portable device if the
volume does not go loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while a
portable audio device is playing. The portable audio
device will continue playing, so you may want to stop it or
turn it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while a portable audio device is playing. Press this button
again and the system will begin playing audio from the
connected portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “no input device found” will be
displayed.
Radio with CD (MP3)
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The
RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
will only work when the information is available.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters will appear on the display. In
rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect
information that will cause the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather, and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and
text information that includes song title and artist name.
A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™
service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
3-67
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
O (Power/Volume):
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, or
XM™ (if equipped). The display will show the selection.
Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio has
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). When SCV is
on, the radio volume automatically adjusts to
compensate for road and wind noise as you speed up
or slow down while driving. That way, the volume
level should sound about the same as you drive. To
activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display will time out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
3-68
f (Tune):
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
a few seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will
go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
and RDS Features): Press the information button
to display additional text information related to the
current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3 song. A choice
of additional information such as: Channel, Song,
Artist, and CAT may appear. Continue pressing the
information button to highlight the desired label, or press
the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels
and the information about that label will be displayed.
While information is not available, No Info will appear on
the display.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature.
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
To store a station as a favorite, perform the following
steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until you
hear a beep. Whenever that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune
knob until the tone control labels appear on the display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or
press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the highlighted setting. You can also adjust
the highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,
FWD or REV button until the desired levels are obtained.
If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
3-69
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the level will be adjusted
to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the tune knob for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until
Manual appears on the display or start to manually adjust
the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing the tune knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,
press the tune knob until the speaker control labels
appear on the display. Continue pressing to highlight the
desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. You
can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either
the SEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desired levels
are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE
label for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep
and the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
3-70
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the tune knob for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations while the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency is
displayed. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired category
name is displayed.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM™ station associated with that category.
3. Rotate the tune knob, press the buttons below the
right or left arrows displayed, or press the right or
left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous
XM™ station within the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display your favorites
again.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT
label.
3. Rotate the tune knob to display the category you
want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed appears on the display.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle and it
must be returned to your dealer for service.
Locked: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
The radio will not allow you to remove or add categories
while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 kmh).
3-71
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
Channel Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-72
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Information
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
CAT Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked
Theftlock® active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message appears after having your vehicle serviced, check
with your dealer.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label (channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receivr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Not Available
XM™ Not Available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-73
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and Load All Discs will be
displayed.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
3-74
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-84 for more
information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Z EJECT:
Press the CD eject button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button. You will hear a beep and Ejecting
Disc will be displayed. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc will appear on display. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
will be automatically pulled back into the player and
begin playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune):
Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD
currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next
track. If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple
times, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on
one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To use
random, do one of the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD
player. A RDM label will appear on display.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under
the RDM label until Random Current Disc is
displayed. Press the pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
3-75
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the LOAD button. You
will hear a beep and Load All Discs will be
displayed. Insert one or more discs partway into the
slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs is displayed. Press the same pushbutton
again to turn off random play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while a
CD is playing. The CD will remain safely inside the radio
for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number will appear
on the display when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system will automatically search for
an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “no
input device found” will be displayed.
Using an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CR-W Disc
The radio will play MP3 and WMA files that were
recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps,
and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist
name, and album will be available for display by
the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Compressed Audio
The radio will also play discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio will read only the
uncompressed audio and ignore the MP3/WMA files.
Pressing the CAT button will toggle between
compressed and uncompressed audio format.
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
3-76
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a.m3u or.wpl extension
(other file extensions may not work).
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders, or
playlists may cause the player to be unable to play
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of
files, folders, playlists or sessions, minimize the
length of the file, folder or playlist name. Long names
also take up more space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc may cause the disc not
to function in the player.
You can change playlists by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.
You can also play an MP3 CD-R that was recorded
using no file folders. If a CD-R contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files,
the player will let you access and navigate up to the
maximum, but all items over the maximum will not
be accessible.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a folder. If
the root directory has compressed audio files, the
directory will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory will be
accessed prior to any root directory folders. However,
playlists (Px) will always be accessed before root folders
or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
3-77
No Folder
When the CD-R contains only compressed files, the
files will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will not be displayed on a
CD-R that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio
will display ROOT.
When the CD-R contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located
under the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to
the root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R will be played in the
following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first folder
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last
folder has been played, play will continue from the
first track of the first folder.
3-78
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name will appear on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have playlist
editing capability using the radio. These playlists will
be treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
Playing an MP3
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD Player),
or press the load button and wait for the message to
insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up. The
player will pull it in, and the CD-R should begin playing.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R in the
player it will stay in the player. When you turn on
the ignition or radio, the CD-R will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size CD-Rs and the
smaller CD-Rs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-84 for more
information.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Z EJECT:
Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently playing,
press and release this button. You will hear a beep and
Ejecting Disc will be displayed. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc will appear on display. The CD-R
can be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R will be automatically pulled
back into the player and begin playing. For the
Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject button for
two seconds to eject all discs.
3-79
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player will continue moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder):
Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
will appear on the display.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. You
will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
will appear on the display.
3-80
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to MP3
files on the CD-R in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD-R or all discs in a six-disc CD player.
To use random, do one of the following:
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R you are listening
to in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc
is displayed. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs is displayed. Press the same pushbutton
again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order by artist
or album. Press the pushbutton located below the
music navigator label. The player will scan the disc to
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It
may take several minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R. The
radio may begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
will begin playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player will default
to playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are
played, the player will move to the next artist in
alphabetic order on the CD-R and begin playing MP3
files by that artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files
by another artist, press the pushbutton located below
either arrow button. You will go to the next or previous
artist in alphabetic order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist is displayed.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the
back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name is displayed on the second
line between the arrows and songs from the current
album will begin to play. Once all songs from that album
are played, the player will move to the next album in
alphabetic order on the CD-R and begin playing
MP3 files from that album.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number will appear
on the display while a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system will automatically search for
an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “no
input device found” will be displayed.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
• There may have been a problem while burning
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while
a CD is playing. The CD will remain safely inside
the radio for future listening.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
the CD.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
3-81
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer while reporting the problem.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while a
portable audio device is playing. The portable audio
device will continue playing, so you may want to stop it
or turn it off.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while a portable audio device is playing. Press this
button again and the system will begin playing audio
from the connected portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “no input device
found” will be displayed.
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. You can connect
an external audio device such as an iPod, MP3
player, CD changer, or cassette player, to the auxiliary
input jack for use as another source for audio
listening.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the car speakers.
When a device is connected, the radio automatically
begins playing audio from the device over the car
speakers.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. You may need to do additional
volume adjustments from the portable device if
the volume does not go loud or soft enough.
3-82
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
The audio steering wheel
controls may be different
depending on your
vehicles options. Some
audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
AM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD, and AUX jack.
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the radio volume.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next
radio station and stay there.
Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio station
stored as a favorite.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to go to the next or previous track.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition):
Press and release this
button to silence the system. Press and release this
button again, to turn the sound on.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button for
longer than one second to interact with the OnStar
system. See the OnStar® System on page 2-32 in this
manual for more information.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
3-83
FM Stereo
Care of Your CDs
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM™
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
3-84
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs to
be properly attached to the post on the glass.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid
line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, make sure that you do not damage the grid lines
for the AM-FM antenna. There is enough space
between the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna
without interfering with radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
3-85
✍ NOTES
3-86
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13
Passing .......................................................4-13
Loss of Control .............................................4-14
Driving at Night ............................................4-16
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17
City Driving ..................................................4-19
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-20
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-21
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22
Winter Driving ..............................................4-24
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-28
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-29
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-29
Towing ..........................................................4-34
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-34
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-34
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-36
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-12.
4-2
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about
0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by
drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three
mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors
like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the
same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or
90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC
would be close to 0.12 percent.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-9.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications on
page 5-3.
4-5
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-31.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has ABS,
this warning light on the
instrument panel
cluster will come on briefly
when you start your
vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on,
and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves
or pulses a little. This is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply your
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though
you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. However, if you do not have ABS, your first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold it
down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels can
stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond
to your steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever
direction it was headed when the wheels stopped rolling.
That could be off the road, into the very thing you
were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
ABS, it is different. See Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) on page 4-7.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Traction Control System
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may
also upshift the transaxle and apply the front brakes to
limit wheel spin.
This light will flash when
your Traction Control
System is limiting wheel
spin. See Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning
Light on page 3-32.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control Light
on page 3-38.
The Traction Control System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’ve
chosen, so you should use the lower gears only
when necessary. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on
page 2-22.
The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message will
appear in the Driver Information (DIC) to let you know if
there is a problem with the system.
4-9
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. When
this message appears, the system will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The Traction Control System
warning light should go off.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the Traction Control
System on. But you can turn the system off if you
ever need to.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow on page 4-28.
To turn the system off or
on, press the traction
control button located near
the exterior lamp control.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves.
When you turn the system off, a chime will sound and a
TRACTION CONTROL OFF message will appear in
the DIC. If the Traction Control System is limiting wheel
spin when you press the button to turn the system
off, the traction control system warning light will come
on and the system will turn off right away.
4-10
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you
have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard
braking can demand too much of those places. You can
lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
4-11
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock your wheels.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-13
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane.
4-14
Remember that your passenger side outside mirror is
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about
what happens when the three control
systems — brakes, steering, and acceleration — do
not have enough friction where the tires meet
the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the
wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure
on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This
restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down
steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the
wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
4-15
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much road
ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-16
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made
much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the
glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean
glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract
repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even
people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield
wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber
start to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry
roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you
will get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower
and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-17
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water crossing,
your vehicle can be carried away. As little as
six inches of flowing water can carry away a
smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other
vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be very
cautious about trying to drive through flowing
water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-54.
4-18
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-20.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-19
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-20
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-21
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
4-22
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-23
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Also see Tires on page 5-54.
4-24
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the
road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be very
careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can
be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can
get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle
has the Traction Control System (TCS), you will want to
slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to
turn the traction control system off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
you will want to brake very gently, too. If you do
have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-7. ABS improves your vehicle’s stability when
you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Whether you
have ABS or not, you will want to begin stopping
sooner than you would on dry pavement. Without ABS,
if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
get the most traction you can.
4-25
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so hard
that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-26
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base
of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does not
collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-27
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-29.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-73.
4-28
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If your
vehicle has traction control, you should turn your traction
control system off. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that may free your
vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries, you
may need to be towed out. If you do need to be
towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show
how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the Vehicle
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-29
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the tire
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation, see Tires on
page 5-54 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label lists the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-30
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity
for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-36 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-31
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
vehicle capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo
should never exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle
capacity weight.
4-32
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load, spread it
out. Do not carry more than 167 lbs (76 kg) in the trunk.
4-33
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else
are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-34
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dolly Towing
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-21.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” following for
more information.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-35
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
4-36
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your
engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-37
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, write to:
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29 for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
If you’re using a weigh-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
4-38
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If
they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label, See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. Do not try to tap into
your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well, or at all.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the
hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-28. Dirt and water
can, too.
4-39
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-40
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need additional
wiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps
will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
If you have overdrive, you may want to drive in
THIRD (3), instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-41
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belts, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.
4-42
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ..................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-17
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-22
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-23
Engine Coolant .............................................5-26
Pressure Cap ...............................................5-28
Engine Overheating .......................................5-29
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ...5-31
Cooling System ............................................5-31
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-38
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-39
Brakes ........................................................5-40
Battery ........................................................5-42
Jump Starting ...............................................5-43
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-47
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-47
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-47
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-48
Taillamps, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ........5-50
Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-51
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-52
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-57
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-60
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-66
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-67
Buying New Tires .........................................5-68
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-71
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-71
Tire Chains ..................................................5-73
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-74
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-76
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-77
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-83
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-85
Appearance Care ............................................5-85
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-85
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-87
Leather .......................................................5-87
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ..................................................5-88
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-88
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-88
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-89
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-89
Finish Care ..................................................5-89
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-90
5-2
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-90
Tires ...........................................................5-91
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-91
Finish Damage .............................................5-91
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-91
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-92
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-92
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-93
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-93
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-93
Electrical System ............................................5-94
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-94
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-94
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-94
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-94
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-95
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-95
Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-97
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-100
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-15.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-65.
5-4
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-93.
If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K only),
you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol
fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel
E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-6. In all other engines, use
only regular unleaded gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Gasoline Specifications
If your vehicle has a V6 engine, use regular unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher.
If the octane rating is less than 87, you may notice an
audible knocking noise when you drive, commonly
referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 in
Canada. Some gasolines may contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors
recommends against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 for additional
information.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code C), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You may also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s
acceleration may be slightly reduced, and you may notice
a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as
spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you may notice
a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-34. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other
fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used
in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-93.
If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K only),
you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol
fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel on
page 5-4. In all other engines, including the 3.5L V6 (VIN
Code N), use only regular unleaded gasoline.
Only vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K)
may use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). General Motors
encourages the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed
to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” fuel,
meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn
and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website (http://
www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that do
have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content.
Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater
than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM
Specification D 5798.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it may be because your E85 fuel is not
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel tank
may improve starting. Your vehicle is designed to
accommodate a mixture of gasoline and E85 fuel. For
good starting and heater efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the
fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than
70% ethanol.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill your fuel tank more often when
using E85 than when you are using gasoline. Regular
unleaded gasoline is recommended when pulling a
trailer. For payload capacity with ethanol fuel, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and may harm your fuel system. Damage
caused by additives would not be covered by
your new vehicle warranty. Do not use additives
with E85 fuel.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap on the hook
on the inside of the fuel door.
5-8
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-89.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-34.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-34.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the interior hood
release handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located to the left
of the parking brake
pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood latch, located near the center of
the hood front, by pushing the latch to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-42.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-97.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-43.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
under Cooling System on page 5-31.
F. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-28.
G. Power Steering Fluid Cap. See Power Steering Fluid
on page 5-38.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-17.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-17.
J. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-40.
L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 3.9L V6 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-42.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-97.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-43.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
under Cooling System on page 5-31.
F. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-28.
G. Power Steering Fluid Cap. See Power Steering Fluid
on page 5-38.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-17.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-17.
J. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 5-23.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-40.
L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
5-15
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-16
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-42.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-97.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-43.
E. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-28.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-38.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-17.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-17.
I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-23.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-40.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
L. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
under Cooling System on page 5-31.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-17
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
V6 Engine
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-100.
5-18
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
5-19
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is
changed.
5-20
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system may not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has GM-trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset
the system. It is also important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being
turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message,
do the following procedures:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds. If the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message flashes, the system
is reset. However, if it stays on, it did not reset.
Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station, or a local recycling center
for help.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-21
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the
following:
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through the
hinges on the housing.
6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing to lock
the cover in place.
5-22
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
How to Check Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid
could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust
system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
5-23
•
•
•
•
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
While pulling a trailer.
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to
drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
The transaxle fluid dipstick
handle is the black loop
with this symbol on it. It is
located near the rear of
the engine compartment.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5-24
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the
dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
V6 Engines
5.3L V8 Engine
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Fluid
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-25
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to the
radiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-29.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
5-26
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
If coolant needs to be added more than four times a
year, have your dealer check the cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery tank
cap has this symbol on it.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on the location of the coolant
recovery tank.
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
5-27
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the cold fill line or a little higher. The cold fill line is
marked with the same symbol as the coolant recovery
tank cap.
Adding Coolant
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
5-28
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-31.
Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
Engine Overheating
There is a coolant temperature gage and a warning light
on the instrument panel that indicate an overheated
engine condition. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-33 and Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 3-33.
In addition, you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE and an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE message displayed on the vehicle’s Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-31 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
CAUTION:
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-31 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
(Continued)
5-29
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If an overheat warning occurs without any sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Set the heater at the highest setting and the fan at
the highest speed and open the windows as
necessary.
5-30
If the overheat warning no longer exists, the vehicle can
be driven. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, the
vehicle can be driven normally.
If the warning continues, and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still there,
turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The coolant temperature gage will indicate
an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles
(km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-17.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
3.5L V6 Engine shown, 3.9L V6 Engine similar
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-31
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
5.3L V8 Engine
A. Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank
5-32
If your vehicle has one of the V6 engines, the coolant
recovery tank is located in the rear of the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. If
your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine, the coolant
recovery tank is located in the rear of the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the cold fill line on the coolant recovery
tank. To check the coolant level, look for the cold fill line
on the side of the coolant recovery tank that faces the
engine. If the level is not correct, there may be a leak at
the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, the fans should be running.
If the fans are not running, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-31 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the cold fill line, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-26 for more information.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use
the recommended coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
5-34
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is at
the cold fill line, start the vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more thing
you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture
directly to the radiator, but be sure the system is cool
before you do it.
1. You can remove the
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the pressure
cap and upper
radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn
the cap slowly
counterclockwise.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
How to Add Coolant to the Cooling
System (V6 Engines)
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-26 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
5-35
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
7. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
8. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
9. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
10. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level in
the coolant recovery tank should be at the cold fill
line when the engine is cold.
3.9L V6 Engine shown, 3.5L V6 Engine similar
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold
fill line.
6. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the pressure cap off.
5-36
How to Add Coolant to the Cooling
System (5.3L V8 Engine)
Notice: Your engine has a specific cooling system
drain and fill procedure. Failure to follow this
procedure could cause your engine to overheat and
be severely damaged. If your engine’s cooling
system needs to be drained and re-filled, please see
your dealer.
1. You can remove the
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the pressure
cap and upper
radiator hose is no
longer hot. Turn
the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-26 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold
fill line.
6. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and the
pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means that there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
7. If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low,
you should have a dealership service department
inspect the vehicle for leaks.
5-37
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located toward
the rear of the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5-38
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The fluid level should be somewhere within the
cross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is at the
ADD mark, you should add fluid.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
A WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when you need to add windshield washer fluid to your
vehicle. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46
for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-39
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
5-40
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-31.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-89.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
5-41
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly.
5-42
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are
wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The
braking performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in
the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for battery
location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-43 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
5-43
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal for that purpose.
5-44
The remote positive (+) terminal is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle, on the underhood fuse block. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal,
remove the fuse block
cover. You should always
use the remote positive (+)
terminal instead of the
positive (+) terminal on the
battery.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location of the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
5-45
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-46
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-51.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Halogen Bulbs
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to
the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if it
is difficult to see the lane markers (for horizontal aim),
or if oncoming drivers flash their high-beam headlamps
at you (for vertical aim).
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
If you believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommend that you take the vehicle to your dealer
for service.
5-47
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
A.
B.
C.
D.
Sidemarker
Low-Beam Headlamp
High-Beam Headlamp
Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
5-48
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Remove the screw from the headlamp assembly.
8. Install the electrical connector to the bulb.
9. Install the new bulb by inserting the smallest tab on
the bulb base into the matching notch in the
retaining ring. Turn the bulb a quarter-turn clockwise
until it stops.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the headlamp plastic retainer by
pulling it up.
4. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle
and remove the electrical connector.
5. Remove the round dust caps to gain access
to the bulbs.
6. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it
from the retaining ring by pulling it away from the
headlamp.
7. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by
raising the lock tab and pulling the connector away
from the bulb’s base.
When you reinstall the headlamp assembly, make
sure to line up the pin in the headlamp assembly
with the slot in the vehicle.
5-49
Taillamps, Stoplamps and Back-up
Lamps
A. Rear Sidemarker Lamp
B. Taillamp/Turn Signal
and Stoplamp
C. Taillamp
3. Pull the carpet away from the rear of the vehicle.
4. Remove the two hex nuts.
5. Pull the assembly from the vehicle.
6. Remove the bulb socket. To do so, press the tab,
turn it counterclockwise and pull it out.
7. Pull the old bulb out. Do not twist it.
8. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.
9. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-11 for more
information.
2. Remove the convenience net, if your vehicle has
one, and then remove it by unhooking the upper
wing nut.
5-50
Back-Up Lamps
The back-up lamps are located in the rear bumper.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamp
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
Headlamps
High-Beam
Low-Beam
Sidemarker Lamp
Stoplamps, Taillamps, and Turn
Signal Lamp
Bulb Number
921
3157
H9
H11
194
3067
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
1. Remove the two screws from the back-up lamp
assembly.
2. Pull the assembly from the rear bumper.
3. Remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise
and pull it out.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out. Do not twist it.
5. Push the new bulb into the socket.
6. Push the socket back into the assembly. Tighten
the socket by turning it clockwise.
7. Reinstall the assembly with the two screws.
5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove
the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip up from
the blade connecting point, and pull the blade
assembly down toward the windshield to remove it
from the wiper arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
snap the clip down into place.
5-52
To remove and replace the wiper blade element do the
following:
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at one
end which are engaged by the bottom claw set of
the wiper blade. At the notched end of the wiper
blade, pull the wiper blade element from the wiper
blade assembly.
2. To replace the element, start at the heel end of the
wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the base of
the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade element,
notched end last, into the wiper blade claw sets.
3. To engage the last claw into the notched end of the
wiper blade element, squeeze the wiper blade
element at the notched area, and push the wiper
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are
engaged by the last claw set, and that all the other
claws are properly engaged in the slots of the
wiper blade element on both sides.
A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13.
5-53
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
5-54
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-29.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-55
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven at
speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare tire
is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air
and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire,
see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-85 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 5-74.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-56
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its
width.
5-57
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
5-58
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with
the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67.
5-59
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-29.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size and recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information Label” under
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
5-60
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding the
compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-85.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated. Check the
tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-61
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Your vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). This system uses radio and sensor technology
to check tire pressure levels. If your vehicle has this
feature, sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, except for the spare tire. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires
and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your
tires is significantly
under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
5-62
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the
TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure warning
symbol on the instrument panel cluster, and at the same
time a message to check the pressure in a specific
tire will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. The low tire pressure warning symbol on
the instrument panel cluster and the check tire pressure
message will appear at each ignition cycle until the
tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Using
the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-40 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46.
The tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This may be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-66 and Tires on page 5-54.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has
Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. If the
system detects a missing or inoperable sensor, an error
message SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM will be
shown on the DIC display. If you have replaced a
tire/wheel assembly without transferring the TPMS
sensors, the error message will be displayed. Once you
re-install the TPMS sensors, the error message
should go off. See your GM dealer for service if all
TPMS sensors are installed and the error message
comes on and stays on.
A tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-29, for an example of the
tire information label and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
5-63
TPMS Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel positions,
in the following order: driver’s side front tire, passenger’s
side front tire, passenger’s side rear tire, and driver’s
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See
your GM dealer for service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
You will have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you will need to start over.
5-64
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off.
3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle information
button until the LEARN TIRE POSITIONS message
displays.
4. Press the set/reset button to allow the system to
learn the tire positions. The horn will sound twice
to indicate the receiver is ready, and the TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message will display.
The TPMS system is ready for the sensor matching
process to begin.
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds, or
until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which may
take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that the
sensor identification code has been matched to the
tire/wheel position. To decrease the tire’s
air-pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap, a
pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 6.
10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
driver’s side rear tire, the tire learning process
ends. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading information
label.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry and Science
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-65
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-67 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-71 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for scheduled rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See “TPMS
Sensor Identification Codes” under Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 5-62.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-100.
5-66
When It Is Time for New Tires
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-74.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-67
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 5-55 for additional information.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 5-85.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-68
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 5-62.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29, for more information
about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its
location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will crash
and suffer serious injury. Only use GM specific
wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-68 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-70
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-71
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
5-72
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P225/55R17 or P235/50R18
size tires, do not use tire chains, there is not
enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/55R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you must. Use
only SAE Class S-type chains that are the proper
size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and
tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
5-73
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
5-74
{CAUTION:
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-75
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-11 for more
information.
2. Turn the center nut on
the compact spare tire
cover counterclockwise
to remove it. Then
remove the cover.
4. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.
3. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-85 for more information.
5-76
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have aluminum wheels. If so, you will
see exposed stainless steel wheel nuts. Use the
wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Do not
remove them yet.
Or, your vehicle may have steel wheel covers.
The tools you will need to change a tire include the
jack (A), extension and protection guide (B), and wheel
wrench (C).
To remove the steel wheel covers and wheel nut caps,
loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench in
a counterclockwise direction. If needed, you can finish
loosening them with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps will not come off.
5-77
Use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off. The edge of the
wheel cover could be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or lay
it face down, as it could become scratched or damaged.
Once you have removed the wheel cover, use the
following procedure to remove the flat tire and install the
spare tire.
1. Turn the wheel wrench
once on each wheel nut
to loosen them. Do not
remove them yet.
2. For all wheel types, find the jacking location using
the diagram above and the corresponding hoisting
notches located in the plastic molding. The
notches in the plastic molding are marked with a
triangle shape to help you find them.
The front location is about 7 inches (17.7 cm) from
the rear edge of the front wheel well. The rear
location is about 8.5 inches (21.6 cm) from the rear
edge of the wheel well.
3. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-78
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-79
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit underneath
the wheel well of the vehicle.
5. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-80
7. Install the compact spare tire.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Reinstall the wheel nuts
with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
5-81
{CAUTION:
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-100 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-100 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
5-82
10. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{CAUTION:
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put the wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
After the compact spare tire has been installed on the
vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with the
protector, located in the foam holder, to help avoid
wheel surface damage.
5-83
To store a full-size tire, do the following:
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.
2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and the
protector/guide placed through a wheel
bolt hole.
3. Remove the protector and attach the retainer
securely.
4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.
When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put the
protector back in the foam holder.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-85. Use
the following as a guide for storing the compact spare
tire and tools.
5-84
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Retainer
Cover
Compact Spare Tire
Wing Nut
Jack
Wheel Wrench
Extension and
Protective Guide
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. You must
calibrate the tire inflation monitor system after installing
or removing the compact spare. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 5-62 for more information. The
system may not work correctly when the compact
spare is installed on the vehicle. Of course, it is best to
replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as
you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good
shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep your
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
5-85
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated
radio antenna and the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
5-86
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
soils, always try to remove them first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
•
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
5-87
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-88
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-92.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-92. Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-89.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
5-89
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-90
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
5-91
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
5-92
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Description
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You will find this label in the trunk. It is very helpful if you
ever need to order parts. On this label, you will find
the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
5-93
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-65.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp circuit is protected by individual fuses in
the underhood fuse block. An electrical overload will
cause the fuse to blow. If this happens, have your
headlamp system checked right away.
5-94
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse. If the
motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper
will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused
by some electrical problem, have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
A circuit breaker in the instrument panel fuse block
protects the power windows and other power
accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
The fuse block is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle in the carpet molding. Remove the fuse
block door to access the fuses.
5-95
Fuses
CNSTR
DR/LCK
PWR/MIR
AIRBAG
DECKLID
Usage
Canister
Door Locks
Power Mirrors
Airbags
Trunk
Fuses
DECKLID RLY Trunk Relay
Fuses
PWR/SEAT
PWR/WNDW
RAP
HTD/SEAT
AUX
AMP
S/ROOF
ONSTAR
5-96
Usage
Power Seats
Power Window
Retained Accessory Power
Heated Seats
Auxiliary Outlets
Amplifier
Sunroof
OnStar®
Usage
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
Fuses
LT PARK
RT PARK
Usage
Driver’s Side Parking Lamp
Passenger’s Side Parking Lamp
Fuses
FAN 1
SPARE
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Spare
5-97
Fuses
SPARE
AIRBAG/
DISPLAY
TRANS
ECM IGN
RT T/SIG
LT T/SIG
DRL 1
HORN
SPARE
PWR DROP/
RANK
STRG WHL
ECM/TCM
RVC SEN
RADIO
FOG LAMPS
5-98
Usage
Spare
Airbag, Display
Transaxle
Engine Control Module, Ignition
Passenger’s Side Turn Signal
Driver’s Side Turn Signal
Daytime Running Lamps 1
Horn
Spare
Power Drop, Crank
Steering Wheel
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
Audio System
Fog Lamps
Fuses
SPARE
BATT 4
STRTR
ABS MTR1
BATT 3
WSW
HTD MIR
SPARE
BATT 1
ABS MTR2
BATT 2
INT LIGHTS
INT LTS/
NL DIM
A/C CMPRSR
AUX PWR
Usage
Spare
Battery 4
Starter
Anti-lock Brake System Motor 1
Battery 3
Windshield Wiper
Heated Mirror
Spare
Battery 1
Anti-lock Brake System Motor 2
Battery 2
Interior Lamps
Interior Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimmer
Air Conditioning Compressor
Auxiliary Power
Fuses
BCM
CHMSL/
BACKUP
DISPLAY
ETC/ECM
INJ 1
EMISSIONS 1
INJ 2
EMISSIONS 2
RT SPOT
LT SPOT
HDLP MDL
DRL 2
FAN 2
FUEL/PUMP
WPR
Usage
Body Control Module
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Back-up Lamps
Display
Electronic Throttle Control, Engine
Control Module
Injector 1
Emissions 1
Injector 2
Emissions 2
Right Spot
Left Spot
Headlamp Module
Daytime Running Lamps 2
Cooling Fan 2
Fuel Pump
Wiper
Fuses
LT LO BEAM
RT LO BEAM
LT HI BEAM
RT HI BEAM
Usage
Driver’s Side Low Beam
Passenger’s Side Low Beam
Driver’s Side High Beam
Passenger’s Side High Beam
Relay
STRTR
REAR DEFOG
FAN 1
FAN 2
A/C CMPRSR
FAN 3
FUEL/PUMP
PWR/TRN
Usage
Starter
Rear Defogger
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Air Conditioning Compressor
Cooling Fan 3
Fuel Pump
Powertrain
5-99
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Application
Capacities
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
3.5L V6 Engine, 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel and 3.9L V6 Engine
1.35 lb
.61 kg
5.3L V8 Engine
1.21 lb
.55 kg
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement
7.6 qt
7.2 L
Cooling System
3.5L V6, 3.5L V6 Flex Fuel and 3.9L V6 Engines
12.2 qt
11.6 L
5.3L V8 Engine
12.8 qt
12.1 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.5L V6, 3.5L V6 Flex Fuel and 3.9L Engines
4.0 qt
3.8 L
5.3L V8 Engine
6.0 qt
5.7 L
Fuel Tank
17.5 gal
66.2 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb-ft
140 Nm
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-100
English
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
3.5L V6
N
Automatic
.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.5L V6 Flex Fuel
K
Automatic
.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.9L V6
1
Automatic
.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3 L V8
C
Automatic
.040 in (1.01 mm)
5-101
✍ NOTES
5-102
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Maintenance Record .....................................6-14
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-20 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message comes on 10 months or more since the
last service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-17. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-20. An Emission Control
•
Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22. See footnote (m).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-66 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
•
page 6-9.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
•
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
•
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter, if equipped. See footnote (g).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22.
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (n).
6-6
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all
hinges and latches, including those for the body doors,
hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release
pawl, rear compartment, glove box door, console door,
and any folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
6-7
Owner Checks and Services
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-26 for
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or
cruise control cables.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-17 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-26 for further details.
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Tire Inflation Check
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-54 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-25.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-66.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-25.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
Engine Oil
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-17.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 5-26.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
6-12
Usage
Windshield
Washer
Fluid/Lubricant
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
System
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transaxle
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Silicone Grease
Weatherstrip Dielectric
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Conditioning
Canada 992887).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
AC Delco Part
Number
Automatic Transaxle Filter
24224522
–
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
10350737
—
3.5L V6, 3.9L V6and 3.5L Flexible Fuel V6 Engines
89017342
PF61
5.3L V8 Engine
88984215
PF46
15284938
CF132
3.5L V6, 3.5L Flexible Fuel and 3.9L V6 Engine
12591131
41-100
5.3L V8 Engine
12571164
41-985
Driver’s Side
19120353
—
Passenger’s Side
19120354
—
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blades 21.6 inches (55.0 cm)
6-13
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-14
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................7-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-14
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, refer to the addresses
below.
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,
(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to
speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
representative.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-5
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
7-6
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number.
•
•
•
•
Telephone number of your location.
Location of the vehicle.
Model, year, color, and license plate number.
Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872), text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Chevrolet’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for new
vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available, up to a five-day
maximum. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original receipts.
7-8
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
7-10
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/
corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered
by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by
that warranty.
Repair Facility
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-11
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is
injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters
have been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if
its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident.
This will help guard against post-accident legal
action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-5 for more information.
7-12
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for a
police report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a
copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some states
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
7-13
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
7-15
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-17
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-66
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-94
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-22
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-19
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-28
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-27
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-52
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-66
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-58
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-60
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-65
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-58
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-59
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-57
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-55
Antenna, Backglass ......................................... 3-85
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..... 3-85
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-32
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-90
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-88
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-92
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-89
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-85
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-87
Finish Care ................................................. 5-89
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-91
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ................................................. 5-88
Leather ...................................................... 5-87
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-91
Tires .......................................................... 5-91
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-91
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-92
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-89
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-90
Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 3-18
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-59
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-83
Backglass Antenna ...................................... 3-85
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-84
1
5-23
2-22
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-18
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-47
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-51
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-47
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-48
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-51
Taillamps, Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps ...... 5-50
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-68
B
C
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 3-85
Battery .......................................................... 5-42
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-17
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-21
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-25
System Warning Light .................................. 3-31
Brakes .......................................................... 5-40
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-100
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-11, 2-28, 4-24, 4-36
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-88
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-84
Your CDs ................................................... 3-84
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-39
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-73
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Radio with CD .................................... 3-62,
Setting the Time .................................. 3-60,
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Automatic Door Lock .......................................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
2
3-84
3-67
3-61
3-82
3-83
3-85
2-10
Charging System Light ....................................
Check
Engine Light ...............................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..........
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ..................................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ...................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces .................................................
Leather ......................................................
Tires ..........................................................
3-30
3-34
5-10
5-92
1-36
1-32
1-41
1-30
1-46
1-48
1-39
3-18
5-90
5-89
5-87
5-89
5-85
5-88
5-87
5-91
Cleaning (cont.)
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-91
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-89
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-90
Climate Control System ................................... 3-19
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-23
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-22
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-10
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-27
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-85
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-15
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-39
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-33
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-33
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-20
Cooling System .............................................. 5-31
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-15
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-38
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-39
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................... 7-14
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15
D
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp
System ...................................................... 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-16
Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-16
Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 3-14
Displacement on Demand™ (DoD™) ................. 2-21
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-15
Door
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-10
Locks .......................................................... 2-9
4
Door (cont.)
Power Door Locks .................................... 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-11
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-18
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-39
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-40
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-53
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-16
City ........................................................... 4-19
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-20
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-22
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-29
Winter ........................................................ 4-24
E
Easy Entry Seat ............................................... 1-9
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-94
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-95
Electrical System (cont.)
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-94
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-95
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-94
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-97
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-94
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-22
Battery ....................................................... 5-42
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-34
Coolant ...................................................... 5-26
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-20
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-33
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-33
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-28
Oil ............................................................. 5-17
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-20
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-31
Overheating ................................................ 5-29
Starting ...................................................... 2-19
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-16
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-30
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-22
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-91
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-74
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-74
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-83
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-23
Power Steering ........................................... 5-38
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-39
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-38
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Folding Rear Seat ........................................... 1-10
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................................ 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-38
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
5
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .........................
Underhood Fuse Block .................................
Windshield Wiper .........................................
5-95
5-95
5-97
5-94
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-33
Fuel .......................................................... 3-38
Speedometer .............................................. 3-26
Tachometer ................................................. 3-26
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-34
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-39
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-47
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-94
6
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-47
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System .................................... 3-14
Delayed ..................................................... 3-14
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-48
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-19
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-38
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-22
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-32
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-60
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-15
Cluster ....................................................... 3-25
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-43
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Courtesy ....................................................
Dome ........................................................
Exterior ......................................................
5-55
3-17
3-15
3-15
3-13
Lamps (cont.)
Fog ........................................................... 3-15
Reading ..................................................... 3-17
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-41
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-27
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-32
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-31
Charging System ......................................... 3-30
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-38
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-33
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-38
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-38
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-34
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-37
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-28
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .................... 3-27
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-26
Security ..................................................... 3-37
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-32
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-34
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-32
7
Lighting
Delayed Entry ............................................. 3-16
Delayed Exit ............................................... 3-16
Entry ......................................................... 3-16
Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-17
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-29
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11
Locks
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-10
Door ........................................................... 2-9
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Power Door ................................................ 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-11
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ...........................
At Each Fuel Fill ...........................................
At Least Once a Month ..................................
At Least Once a Year ....................................
Introduction ..................................................
8
6-6
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-2
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-34
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3
Manual Passenger Seat .................................... 1-2
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-30
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-30
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-30
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-32
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-32
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-31
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
P
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-18
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13
Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-17
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-26
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-27
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-25
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-28
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-28
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-23
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-60
Passing ......................................................... 4-13
PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-16
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-16
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-17
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10
Electrical System ......................................... 5-94
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-19
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-38
Windows .................................................... 2-14
Pressure Cap ................................................. 5-28
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-29
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............... 2-11
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-26
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-17
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-37
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-20
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-30
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-32
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-22
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-32
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-32
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-31
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-31
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
9
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-16
R
Radios .......................................................... 3-59
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-84
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-84
Radio with CD .................................... 3-62, 3-67
Setting the Time .................................. 3-60, 3-61
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-82
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-83
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-17
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-27
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-39
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-25
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-30
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar® ..................................................... 2-31
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-30
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-30
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-34
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-76
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-51
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-14
United States Government ............................ 7-14
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-67
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash ..................................................... 1-68
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-19
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-25
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-29
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-29
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ............................ 3-27
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-29
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-26
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-88
Driver Position ............................................ 1-18
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-17
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-16
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................... 1-27
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-25
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-25
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-30
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-8
Seats
Easy Entry Seat ............................................ 1-9
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3
Seats (cont.)
Manual Passenger ......................................... 1-2
Power Seat .................................................. 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-8
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................ 1-10
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-46
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-48
Security Light ................................................. 3-37
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-34
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-65
Setting the Time ..................................... 3-60, 3-61
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-91
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-26
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-27
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7
11
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-85
Installing .................................................... 5-77
Removing ................................................... 5-76
Storing ....................................................... 5-83
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-100
Speedometer .................................................. 3-26
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................... 1-10
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-19
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-83
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-39
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-39
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-39
Glove Box .................................................. 2-39
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-39
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-28
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-14
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-40
12
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-26
Taillamps
Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps .................... 5-50
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-32
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-82
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-15
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-15
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-16
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-16
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-34
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-90
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-68
Chains ....................................................... 5-73
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-74
Cleaning .................................................... 5-91
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-85
Tires (cont.)
Different Size .............................................. 5-69
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-74
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-60
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-66
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-77
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-62
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-76
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-83
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-57
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-71
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-71
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-67
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-34
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-36
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-34
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-32
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-22
Trunk ............................................................ 2-11
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................
Universal Home Remote System .......................
Operation ...................................................
3-83
5-70
2-34
2-35
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-29
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-53
13
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-93
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-93
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-22
Visors ........................................................... 2-14
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-24
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-71
Different Size .............................................. 5-69
Replacement ............................................... 5-71
14
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-39
Windows ....................................................... 2-13
Power ........................................................ 2-14
Windshield
Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-39
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-52
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-90
Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-94
Wipers ......................................................... 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-24
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-85
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Download PDF

advertising